JP6725556B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

A conventional game machine can display a timer (predetermined display) having a different effect mode during variable display, and can execute a predetermined effect when the timer is timed out (in a specific mode). (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-79866, A

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem in that the effect due to the different presentation modes of the predetermined display is insufficient, so that the player cannot pay attention to the predetermined display and the interest cannot be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

Of the gaming machine hand stage 1,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ,
Suggesting produce suggesting that controlled before Symbol advantageous conditions (for example, reach demonstration or cut-in effect) and, prior to execution of the suggested presentation, display a predetermined display indicating the time to the suggestion effect is executed Then, by sequentially updating the predetermined display according to the passage of time (for example, the operation of subtracting the value of the normal timer or the special timer) , the predetermined effect that suggests the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed (for example, normal operation). Effect execution means capable of executing at least a timer effect or a special timer effect) and a specific effect that makes the predetermined display difficult or invisible (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display shown in FIGS. 10-14). Part that executes staging process),
Equipped with
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, and a special timer effect) having a different effect mode from the first predetermined effect,
The effect execution means, before executing the predetermined effect, a first special effect (for example, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect) and a second special effect (for example, a first special effect that is different in effect mode from the first special effect). A second timer effect execution suggesting effect) (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect executing suggesting effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-15),
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first predetermined effect is executed (for example, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed, (A portion where the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed),
When the second special effect is executed, the second predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first special effect is executed (for example, when the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed). Is a portion that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed),
The period from the execution of the first special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect is different from the period from the execution of the second special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect,
The special effect is an effect that suggests execution of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, a first timer effect execution suggestion before the normal timer effect or the special timer effect). Part that executes the effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect),
The presentation execution section, wherein Ri executable der at different timings special effect (for example, as shown in Figure 10-26 as a modification 155SG-2, the first timer demonstration execution suggested effect a second timer demonstration execution suggested The part where the execution timing is different from the production) ,
When the specific effect is executed during execution of the predetermined effect, the suggestion effect is executed.
End the specific effect that is being executed before imming,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine hand stage 2, a gaming machine according to the means 1,
The special effect is an effect that suggests execution of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, a first timer effect execution suggestion before the normal timer effect or the special timer effect). Part that executes the effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect),
The effect execution means can execute the special effect at different timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 as a modified example 155SG-2, a first timer effect execution suggestion effect and a second timer effect execution suggestion effect). (The part where the execution timing is different from)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to at which timing the special effect is executed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine Hand stage 3, a gaming machine according to the means 1 or means 2,
The period from the execution of the first special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect is different from the period from the execution of the second special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, modified example). As 155SG-3, a period from the execution of the first timer effect execution suggesting effect to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect, and the execution of the second timer effect executing suggestion effect from the normal timer effect or the special timer effect. (The part that changes the period until the performance is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being lowered due to the monotonous game during the period from the execution of the special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect.

Gaming machine Hand stage 4, a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 3,
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The special effect is an effect that suggests the period of the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22(A) or FIG. 10-23(A), a normal timer effect period or a special timer effect period). Is notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
The effect execution means,
The predetermined effect can be executed by targeting at least one of the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22(A) or FIG. 10-23(A), (A portion for notifying the period of the normal timer effect or the period of the special timer effect with the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B),
As the special effect, it is possible to suggest a total value of a predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and a predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 10-24(A)). As shown in FIG. 7, a portion for notifying the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect in the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the total value of the predetermined effect period for the first predetermined display and the predetermined effect period for the second predetermined effect is suggested, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine Hand stage 5 is a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 4,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting motion,
The effect execution means, at a timing before the execution of the first special effect and the second special effect, based on the detection result of the motion detection means, common effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (B) In addition, it is possible to execute the operation promoting image 148SG005P for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed after the common effect, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine Hand stage 6 is a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 5,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting motion,
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The effect execution means can execute an action corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on the detection result of the operation detecting means,
In the first predetermined display, a first period (for example, 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer production until the decorative pattern becomes a combination of reach as shown in FIG. 10-20B) has elapsed as the predetermined production. It is a display that becomes the specific mode when
The second predetermined display is a second period that is longer than the first period as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20(B), the cut-in effect starts from the start of the special timer effect). 45 seconds or 55 seconds until it is done is a display that becomes the specific mode when,
During the second period, the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than that in the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect). (While is executed, the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game during the predetermined effect.

Gaming machine Hand stage 7, a gaming machine according to any of the means 1 to means 6,
The effect execution means,
It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, the concealment effect shown in FIG. 10-28 as a modified example 156SG-2) that changes the predetermined display to a visually difficult state.
When the predetermined display is in the visually difficult state, the predetermined display is not set to the specific mode (for example, before the short timer times out, as shown in FIG. 10-28 as a modification 156SG-2). (The part that ends the concealment of the short timer)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute the predetermined effect and the change effect.

The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a large hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a large hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. It is the flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. Explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize|stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various jackpots. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game controls. It is the figure which shows the data retention area for production control. It is the figure which shows a part of production control process treatment. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is explanatory drawing of the determination ratio of a normal timer effect and a special timer effect, and each timer effect. It is the figure which shows the decision ratio of the reach information aspect in normal timer production and the production result decision ratio of button operation production during special timer production. It is a figure which shows the production|generation aspect determination ratio of a cut-in production. It is a figure showing the execution decision rate of each timer effect execution suggestion effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is the flowchart which shows one example of timer production execution suggestion production execution processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the normal timer production execution processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special timer production execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button operation production execution processing. It is a flow chart in the case of executing only the normal timer effect. It is the flowchart when executing only the special timer effect, and the flowchart when executing both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described below) are prepared, and the big hit is determined according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc. Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special display game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed in the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of reserved figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted as described above is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when the "big hit" is set Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether the reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts varying It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125, which receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the main board 11 receives an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command for ending the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit mid-game production process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit medium production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach lost pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is "missed". -2, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". Reach loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1(B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in Fig. 8-1(B), the reliability when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach. Reach B becomes higher in the order of super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) the reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1(B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is informed of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is informed of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated and the effect of production is improved. The title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2(A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect of the super reach (also referred to as super reach effect) is completed, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 (here, “SP reach A” here) of the super reach A is displayed on the entire screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here “super reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

When the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2(E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2(G). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B that is confronted with is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect and the like, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C)→(D)→(E)...) and super reach B (FIG. 8-2(C)→(F)→(G)...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach is performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title is notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the name of the reach title (here, "defeat the enemy"), thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to exactly match the reach of the big hit of the reach.

It should be noted that the notification by the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of the reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of the reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be one (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display areas for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B having a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D having a jackpot reliability lower than that of super-reach A and super-reach B is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

Note expectations suggested display, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, not limited to that shown by the number of black star, may be suggested expectation by the meter or gauge, expectations You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to the degree. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Timing display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the below-described determination effect is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Then, if the display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 8-3(C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-3(D), A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "miss", an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is finished before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

In addition, when displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, during the reach effect of super reach, it is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Then, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), the title of the super reach A is notified, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of the super reach B is notified and the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8D, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4(B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating a failure) is displayed. It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and It is also possible to execute the anticipation suggestion effect in which the anticipation degree is suggested by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star in the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5(F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases. You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8 and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

FIGS. 8-5(G) to (L) are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5(G). At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star in the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound “Pong” indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 8-5(L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., by varying the title notification mode, the effect is diversified and the effect effect is increased. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation level) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect in which the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6(A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed in accordance with the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7(B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound according to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, the effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Figure 8-9(A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and "black" to "fruit pattern". There are those that change, and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of changing the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area is "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of super-reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9(B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined in a ratio different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode of the dialogue of the character in the reach production of the super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach effect of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Fig. 8-9(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from "white", "red", and "white" to "red". ), the jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, in the case where the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice mode is obtained. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that instead of the announcement of the dialogue, the announcement production of announcing the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the production mode of the reach production. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of timings for changing the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies depending on the change timing.

After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice can be executed in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low-reliability super reach). Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be enabled. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and for example, the determination rate may be changed depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of the effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is acted when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of the title and the dialogue depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title as in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title or the expectation suggestion display. In this case, the title or the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification regarding other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) having different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5 as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the zone that has been moved The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of mission titles.

(Modification 31AK-1 of Characteristic Section 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win/loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10(E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to a pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11(H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11(I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time when the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed at the central portion as shown in FIG. 8-11(K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11(L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11(M), a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11(L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability in the case of being hit is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach notification and the expectation degree indication are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 31AK-2 of Characteristic Section 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title showing the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification of outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 8-12(c).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the display returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 8-12(f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol “777” is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12A and 8D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence/absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the determination regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. Note that the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described characteristic part 31AK, and will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 122SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. And a setting changeover switch 122SG052 functioning as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) of a jackpot, which will be described later in the setting change state, and an opening sensor 122SG090 for detecting opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Is provided.

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switching switch 122SG052, is housed in the substrate case 122SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 122SG051 and the setting switching switch 122SG052 are included. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed on the left side of the back side of the board case 122SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 122SG201.

Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the game machine frame 3 by using it. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later and an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation by a setting key. In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

FIG. 9-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 9-3(B), the determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started a setting value changing operation (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command that notifies wp that the operation of confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting change state). The command E106H is a set value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 It is provided with a random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the characteristic part 122SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-4, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, so that the normal reach variation pattern and the In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

Note that, in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. after the previously determined, instead of determining the variation pattern to run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined, using only random numbers MR3 for variation pattern determined without determining these types However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuation pattern types are set. from determined from the random number value for judgment before the type of variation patterns may be determined variation pattern that run from fluctuation patterns belonging to the type that the determined.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern that is the normal reach loss is set, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed 3 times and the variation pattern may be set as super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-7, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-6(B), and FIG. -6 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 9-7 (A) jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), Figure 9-7 (B) jackpot type determination Other than the table (for the second special symbol), a big hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. Has become. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 3 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the payout rate is. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and the smaller the value becomes in the order of 2, the lower the advantage gradually. In other words, the set value, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value to the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value in the order of 2, the more advantageous the value to the amusement hall side.

9-6(A) to 9-6(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special drawing and the second special drawing is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(A) to FIG. 9-6(C), in each display result determination table, when the game state is the probability changing state (high accuracy state), the normal state or the time saving state (low (Determined state), more judgment values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit”. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special map display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability is determined (in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value is 1/200, when the setting value is 2/150, when the setting value is 3/1/99) In comparison, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit gaming state is high (in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/150, the set value is When it is 2, it is 1/99, and when the set value is 3, it is 1/50). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

Further, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state and the set value. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-6(A) to FIG. 9-6(C), regardless of the game state or the set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled. The probability of being determined then is set to 1/200. In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the small hitting result may be different according to the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit gaming status or small hit. The probability that it is decided to control in the gaming state is low, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special map display result is "big hit" or "small hit". A determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the state is high (big hit probability and small hit probability: set value 3>set value 2>set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C). If any of the hit judgment values are met, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C) exemplify a mode in which the winning probability of the small hit is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1), the winning probability of the small hit is the same. May be

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit, using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C). However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually judged whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. Good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C), the determination values are assigned to the small hits in the respective display result determination tables, but shown in FIG. 9-6(A). In the display result determination table (the display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

9-7(A) and 9-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 9-8. In the feature portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low accuracy high base state, and the big hit game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a probable variation big hit) are set so as to shift to the high-precision high-base state.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit which is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment), or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hits A to C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2. You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportion for determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of the set values 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When 1 is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportion for determining the big hit C becomes lower in the order of the set values 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special diagram is the second special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When 1 is 1, the payout rate is the lowest.

In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. That is, the case where the determination ratio of the big hit type is different depending on the set value that is set is that one of the big hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B may be provided. ..

In this way, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. ..

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change. The present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, the game ball during the big hit game is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. While the game state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state based on passing, the game property (so-called V that the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map). Probability variation type), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called mixed type 1 type 2 type). Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time a game ball passes through a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a certain state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined that the variation display result is “miss” is prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are set. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9(A) and 9-9(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B and jackpot C. These jackpot variation pattern determination tables (jack jacks) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(A), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, 1 to 3 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 350 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and from 826 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 300 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 301 to 800 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9(B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot B, jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 150 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 200 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. The set value is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. The ratio is higher than the ratio, and is lower in the order of set values 3, 2, and 1.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when the determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, regardless of whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 0. Of 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, With the set values 1, 2, and 3, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-miss, within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIG. 9-10(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “2”, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 351 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for low base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 450 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range of the determination value of MR3 of 0 to 997, and 401 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach that correspond to the total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 451 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for the loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 9-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 501 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 451 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern is , Set values 3, 2, 1 are lowered in this order. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 of the determination values are the super reach β loss. If the fluctuation display results are all assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

The "common determination rate" in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment is different from the "common determination rate" in that the setting rate is completely the same at different setting values (the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment). In which the determination rate is the same (for example, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach differs between the set value 1 and the set value 3 by about 1%).

In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that has been set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the loss variation determination rate and the super reach β loss variation determination rate may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value that is set is Regardless of the above, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different according to the set value, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, if the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the non-reach-loss variation of the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of pending storages is increased, the variation pattern of non-reach loss with a short variation time is determined, the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not reserved memory, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the long fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display becomes longer.

Further, in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10(A) to 9-10(C), fluctuations are made by using different fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss according to the total number of pending storages. Although the mode for deciding the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the number of pending storage of the second special symbols).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss. The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the super reach loss) The appearance rate) varies depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, a variation display is performed in a variation pattern of super reach loss according to a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but an example is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display shows the super reach loss in the same ratio. It may be executed in a changing pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball has passed (entered) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet The pending data of the game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit associates the winning number (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the first start winning hole and establishes the first start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on the CPU 103, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

The second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not yet started. The pending data of the figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number in the second starting winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with the holding number, and establishes the second starting condition in passing (entry) of the gaming ball. Based on the CPU 103, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). In this way, the pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passing (entering) of the gaming starting ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. ..

The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (122SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). .. In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets a production control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the production control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start wait timer is decremented by 1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa008). When the production control board start start waiting timer is not timed out (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is re-executed to stand by until the production control board 12 is activated. Moreover, when the production control board activation start waiting timer is timed out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the opening sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), the set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed on the display monitor 122SG029, and displayed by the clerk at the game hall. By visually observing the monitor 122SG029, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009; N) or the open sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa011 after executing the set value confirmation process. That is, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is activated without being operated, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is impossible.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets a production control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the production control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start wait timer is decremented by 1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether the effect control board activation start wait timer has timed out (122SGSa016). When the production control board start start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is re-executed, and the production control board 12 is on standby until it is activated. When the production control board activation start waiting timer is timed out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is determined whether there is any (122SGSa018).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021 ( 122SGSa019).

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, setting change processing for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa020). Is executed and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021. That is, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, the set value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. ing.

If the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF in 122SGSa019a, it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

9-12 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 9-13(B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value confirmation process is completed by transmitting (122SGSa035).

Note that, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (setting value confirmation processing ends), the state becomes the same as when it is activated by a normal hot start, so in the processing of 122SGSa035 The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 9-13(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). When the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, when the RAM 102 has an abnormality (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the head address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” in the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041;Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042;N), "00H" is set in the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets. 1 is set. Then, it is judged whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the designated address is not the last address of RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047), and if the designated address is the last address of RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

In the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area as shown in FIG. 9-13(B). Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, at other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated, special figure hold storage, or general figure hold The game information including memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. A value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment is the address (F001 to FXXX) excluding the address (F000) where the set value is stored when the RAM 102 has no abnormality and there is backup data. ) To clear data other than the set value, while if there is something wrong with the RAM 102 or if there is no backup data, all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102 will have "00H". Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

In the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the head address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 in this manner, when the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 9-13(A) is executed, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is set as the address for clearing the data. The address "00H" may be sequentially stored from the address F000 to the address immediately before the address.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, an example of clearing the data excluding the set value in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the feature section 122SG of this embodiment) is cleared. You may

Further, the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch backup information is used for game control. A process of storing and reading the clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing the clear switch backup information in the register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, one of an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the clear switch backup information is stored in the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The setting value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the setting value changing process is started (timing at which the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13(B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting change switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), 122SGSa057 is executed without executing 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. In other words, the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored in the address F001 (temporary setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) in the address F000, and thus the setting value stored in the address F001 is changed to the main setting value. Is stored as (change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change process is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is ended).

In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening, operation of the clear switch, pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051, etc. By setting the lock switch 122SG051 to OFF after performing the operation of, a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start or is activated in the setting change state, a cold start notification command or setting value change start for the production control board 12 is started. Although the mode in which the RAM clear process is executed before transmitting the notification command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process notifies the effect control board 12 of a cold start. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is executed again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). Clear the data). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a problem such as the game being started while the illegal data is stored in the RAM.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the common pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated after performing a common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) when it is activated by a cold start and when it is activated by a setting change state. Although a mode in which a command (a cold start notification command, a set value change start notification command, or a set value change end notification command) according to the state is transmitted to the effect control board 12 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The command depending on the activated state (a cold start notification command, a set value change start notification command or a set value change) is used depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or is set and changed. The common RAM clearing process may be executed after transmitting the end notification command) to the effect control board 12.

Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). .. As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the power cut detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a power cut signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input. Is determined (122SGSa051). If the power-off signal is not input (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. If the power-off signal is input (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set value stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Next, the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control process, control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, control for performing a predetermined operation confirmation, and the like for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 are executed.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input process described later After accepting the input of information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When the hot start notification command is not received (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started). , Information including the number of times of super-reach) (122SGS408), the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by displaying an image on the image display device 5, emitting the game effect lamp 9, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to inform the clerk of the game hall that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

If the cold start notification command is not received (122SGS407; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, notification that the setting value change operation is in progress (setting value change notification) ) Is executed (122SGS411). In addition, the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, and the clerk of the game hall or the like who changes the setting value is the main board 11 In this state, the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the vehicle is visually recognized. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like in the amusement hall who changes the set value, so that the store clerk in the amusement hall displays the image. It is considered that it is not possible to judge from the display of the device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the set value change notification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the store clerk of the game arcade who changes the set value. It is sufficient to notify that

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the setting value of the setting value has ended (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). Value) is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (values of "1" to "3" corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

Note that the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after execution of setting value change notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and setting value change notification is performed. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the RAM 122 is cleared while the setting value changing notification is being executed, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value changing notification, or the RAM clear notification may be performed after the setting value changing notification is completed. The notification may be executed.

When the set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value check start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether it has been activated (122SGS414). When the set value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), a set value confirming notification process for notifying that the setting is in the confirmed state (the set value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is performed. Execute (122SGS415). In the set value confirmation notification process, the image of the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 emits light, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and the clerk of the game hall that started the pachinko gaming machine 1, It suffices to be able to inform the surroundings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that it is in the setting confirmation state. If the set value confirmation end notification command has not been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405 and proceeds to the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change start notification command, and the setting It waits until any command of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (the processes of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, 122SGS414 are repeatedly executed).

In this way, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations from the input of the player information, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations from the previous activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach number and the like and setting value information (any one of the values “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to be overwritten (updated).

That is, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the player information and the performance information are cleared, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state. Exemplifies a form in which the player information and the effect information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, The person information and the effect information may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, in 122 SGS 417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display is performed. The device 5 starts displaying the initial symbol corresponding to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative pattern is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3” from the left as the initial pattern. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as the initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting value (eg, “1”) advantageous to the player is set. If set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", "6" as the initial design at a higher rate than the case where the setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "3") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “1”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R is used depending on whether a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set or a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "3"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the CPU 120 for effect control sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

In the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the activation notification mode is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound B for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R are the same, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R. It includes both performing the output of B.

Further, when the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect. The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound C for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). To execute. It should be noted that the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the sound for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output of C and the display of the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 are executed.

As described above, the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing of the image display device 5 are the same, so these pachinko games are performed. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start), the cold start notification command When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state) The period is 40 seconds.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by providing the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a gaming machine management computer or each counter. As a start notification when the above, the external output terminal may output a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started to the management device.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device that executes the start notification is common. Although there is illustrated a mode in which the game effect lamp 9 emits light and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in any case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification is different depending on whether the start is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device 5 A message image is displayed at, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device).

In addition, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamp 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is in the opened state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (for the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. In many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting changing” is displayed on the image display device 5, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM has been cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the setting value change ends (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value is changed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used in each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The startup notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. The form in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when activating is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these initialization effects are The mode of the boot notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is booted, or only a part thereof may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, cold start, started in setting change state, or started in setting confirmation state However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the CPU 120 for effect control executes power-off detection processing (122SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). When the power-off signal is not input (122SGS431; N), the process is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, next, the CPU 120 for effect control analyzes the received effect control command, and sets the flag according to the received effect control command and the like (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a production random number updating process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process (122SGS426) for receiving an input of player information, and a game. A player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting player information and a performance information totaling process (122SGS428) for totaling performance information are executed. Then, it transfers to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. After the completion of displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko gaming machine The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variation display, a big hit game, and a super reach are executed. To do.

Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. The process is executed.

If the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is either "0" or "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the prefetch restriction counter is decremented by −1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the activation, execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and thus the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the winning a prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays by not executing (see 5).

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or in a setting change state, it is possible to play a game based on the fact that the game is possible. As the setting, the form in which the execution of the pre-reading notice production is restricted over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or not. Based on the fact that the game is possible regardless of whether the game is started in the changed state, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC are set as the settings related to the game progress. The production settings and the like may be set to the factory-shipped state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the effect control CPU 120 controls the super reach A or the super reach B as the first suggested effect. The reach effect and the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D as the second suggestion effect can be executed, and when the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is executed, the reach effect is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D or the super reach D, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect Can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes Invention 122SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the game machine is powered on and activated (power supply to the game machine was started. At the time), a command (control information) output from the main board to the production control board (production control means) in order to restore the game machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. And, regardless of whether the main board is backed up, a command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed up memory, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, the effect control board is appropriate according to the activation state when the game machine is powered on and activated. There was a problem that it was not possible to execute various processes. Therefore, when attention is paid to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of invention 122SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part)
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part)
Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding storage contents for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
Effect control means capable of controlling effects based on control information (for example, effect control command shown in FIG. 9-3) output from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 clears RAM shown in FIG. 9-17) (Notification processing, setting value changing notification processing, setting value confirmation notification processing, etc.),
Equipped with
The game control means restores, based on the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, as a starting state when the power supply to the game machine is started after the power supply to the game machine is stopped. A state (for example, hot start), a second startup state (for example, cold start) in which the stored contents are erased and restored regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage unit, and setting by the setting unit is possible And a different control information corresponding to the activated state is output to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14). In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, the CPU 103 sends a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the CPU 103 causes the effect control board. 12 to send a cold start notification command to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the game control means when power supply is started. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 122SG,
A production control storage unit (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the production control unit is provided,
Of the information stored in the effect control storage means, the information to be deleted is different depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state).
A game machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasing according to the activated state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 122SG,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a setting value change end notification command) designating the end of the third activated state,
The effect control means performs a special control according to the end of the third starting state based on the output of the control information designating the end of the third starting state (for example, shown in FIG. 9-20. As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds in the start notification processing. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control unit performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, hot control). Based on the reception of the start notification command or the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification processing)
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by the specific control that the game machine is in the activated state in which the set value cannot be set.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 122SG,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, based on the reception of the hot start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 In the start notification process, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and receives the cold start notification command. Based on the fact that the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds in the start notification processing, and the setting value change end notification command is received, A part in which the CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and executes a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the start notification processing. As shown in -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command, the decorative design is displayed as a combination of "1", "2", "3" as the initial design, or the set value is set. Based on the receipt of the change end notification command, the decorative pattern is displayed as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activated state.

Furthermore, as means 6 of the invention 122SG,
When the set value is changed in the third activated state, the game control means deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for the specific information (for example, modified example 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 excluding the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared. part)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of invention 122SG,
The game control means is provided with a game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used for controlling the progress of the game,
The timing of erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is different between the first activated state and the second activated state (for example, as shown in modification 122SG-4, a pachinko machine). When the game machine 1 is started by cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is sent to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state. , A portion that executes the RAM clearing process at the timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the deletion of the game information at an appropriate timing according to the activated state.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 123SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the game machine is powered on and activated (power supply to the game machine was started. When the main board is cleared regardless of the memory backed up (general startup state) and the setting value of the gaming machine can be changed (set startup state) If the notification mode is the same in, there is a problem that it is difficult to find out whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to detect an illegal setting change of the gaming machine. It was Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of invention 123SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part)
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part)
Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
A start notification means (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the start notification processing shown in FIG. 9-17) capable of notifying the start state of the game control means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started,
Equipped with
The game control means, as the start-up state, a general start-up state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) that clears the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and the setting means Has a setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) that enables the setting,
The start notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start). , Emission of the game effect lamp and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, emission of the game effect lamp and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, image (The part that executes the display of the message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, since it is possible to easily identify whether the starting state is the general starting state or the setting starting state, it is possible to easily detect fraud caused by the setting. ..

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 123SG,
The start notification means can execute various notifications according to priority,
The priority of the notification of the set activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-5, during execution of the high-priority setting value change notification, (The part that does not execute the RAM clear notification of low priority)
According to this feature, since the notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent the fraud caused by the setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 123SG,
The start notification means notifies the setting start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1). (The part where the notification period is 40 seconds when it is started with the setting changed)
A gaming machine characterized by that is described, and according to this characteristic, appropriate notification can be executed in a period according to the activated state.

Furthermore, as Means 4 of Invention 123SG,
The start notification means,
A first notification means (for example, the image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, game effect lamp 9 or speakers 8L, 8R) different from the first notification means,
The setting notification state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20),
The general activation state is informed by the second informing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, a portion that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, since the start notification is executed by different notification means, it is possible to easily recognize which start state the game machine is in.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 123SG,
The game control means is a game enabled state after the setting activated state, and a game enabled state after the general activated state, game control by common settings as settings relating to the game progress (for example, Since the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, it is possible to execute (a part that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect) up to four variable displays. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent occurrence of inconvenience such as recognition that the setting has been changed by executing the game control with different settings.

Further, the present invention also includes Invention 124SG described below. That is, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-137351, if the gaming information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the setting value, the gaming machine is installed in a store or a player. There is a risk of giving disadvantages. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of invention 124SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 9-14) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting values of 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part)
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and capable of executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part)
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Notification means capable of giving advance notification that the game information stored in the game information storage means will be erased (for example, the part for the effect control CPU 120 to execute the setting value change confirmation notification process in the modification 122SG-1). When,
Equipped with
When the setting value is newly set by the setting means, the game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the CPU 103 is a modification 122SG-1). (The part that executes the RAM clear processing shown in),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation to turn on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation to turn on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turn off the lock switch 122SG051). And the operation)
The setting means can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1, when the CPU 103 has the clear switch turned on). After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation, and thus is changed by the setting change operation. The setting value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1), the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the process of 122SGSa058. ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as a modification 122SG-1, the production control CPU 120 starts the first set value change. (A part that executes the set value change confirmation notification process based on the determination that the notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 124SG,
When the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means displays the game information stored in the game information storage means. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF after the CPU 103 determines that the setting switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1. If determined, the setting value change processing is terminated without executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) based on the fact that the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y). Part)
A gaming machine characterized by that is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by deleting the game information even if the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is ended without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modification 122SG-1). As shown in FIG. 9-25, a portion in which the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the setting value change confirmation notification process).
According to this feature, the operator can recognize the operation method for preventing the game information from being erased, so that the game information is not intended. It can be further prevented from being erased.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 124SG,
The game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means when an erasing condition is satisfied when a power supply to the gaming machine is started and a predetermined confirmation operation is performed. At least a part of the information is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main processing (122SGSa003; Y) and then executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification means performs the notification even when the erasing condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modification 122SG-2, a message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5). part)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 124SG,
An effect control unit (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information output from the game control unit,
Storage means for effect control (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
A selection unit (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to erase the effect control storage unit;
Equipped with
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when the selecting means does not execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in the modification 122SG-3, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erase condition is set when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Is satisfied, and if the selecting means selects to execute the deletion in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is deleted. At the same time, at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, a part that clears both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 as shown in Modification 122SG-3).
According to this feature, whether or not to delete the effect control storage means together with the deletion in the game information storage means when the deletion condition is satisfied is described. Can be selected.

Although the characteristic portion 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. However, it is included in the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed to allow the pachinko gaming machine 1 to set a new setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, and if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, in the setting change process. The RAM clear process may be executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As described above, in the case where the RAM clear process is executed based on the setting of a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modified example 122SG-1, In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits to the effect control board 12 a first set value change number notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change process (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and when the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON ( 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second set value change start notification command indicating that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting change switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. It is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting change switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), 122SGSa057 is executed without executing 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

If the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a setting value (temporary setting value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). When the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, when the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. It transmits to the control board 12 and ends the setting change processing (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when the setting value (temporary setting value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the setting value stored in the address F000 and the setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 are stored. Are compared (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, the set value change end notification command is controlled. The setting change process is completed by transmitting to the board 12 (122SGS061).

Further, when different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, it is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 (the setting value of the newly set pachinko gaming machine 1) is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clearing process (122SGSa060) executes the same process as the RAM clearing process described in FIG. 9-13, and the data (stored at and after the address F001, excluding the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102). Current data) is cleared. After the RAM clear process (122SGSa060) is executed, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in Modification 122SG-1. In the effect control main processing in the modified example 122SG-1, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. 9-24, the first setting value change. It is determined whether or not the start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). When the first set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and when the first set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y), , The setting value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value in the image display device 5, or the lock is set if the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25(A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). When the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). When the set value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and waits until the first set value change start notification command or the set value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

When the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). When the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processing of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. When the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). When the set value designation command is not received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and when the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b; Y), the set value designation command is received. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Value is stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 9-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, whereby the pachinko game machine with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the clerk or the like in the game hall. When 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-25(A), in the image display device 5, by changing the setting value, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the setting value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

When a store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as described above, as shown in FIG. Without changing the setting value of, and without clearing the RAM 102, the decorative pattern is displayed as a initial pattern in the combination of "1", "2", "3" on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the clerk at the amusement arcade turns the clear switch on again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-25(C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Indicates that the setting value is being changed, and the image display device 5 displays an image, the game effect lamp 9 emits light, and sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the setting value is being changed.

Then, in the setting change state, when the store clerk or the like of the amusement hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value, or when the store clerk or the like of the amusement hall has the same new set value as the original set value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared as shown in FIG. 9-25(D). Instead, the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5 as the initial design in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". Furthermore, when a store clerk or the like in the amusement hall sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051 in the setting change state, as shown in FIG. The RAM 102 is cleared based on the change of the, and the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5 as the initial design in a combination of “4”, “5”, and “6”.

In the modified example 122SG-1, the setting value is changed to the image display device 5 by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a clear switch and a lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk or the like in the game hall. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not displayed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 has been exemplified. Not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modified example 122SG-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state in which a clear switch is turned on by a clerk or the like in the amusement hall, thereby displaying an image. The fact that the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the device 5 by cold start, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started by cold start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted. The instruction to perform may be displayed as the message image 122SG005M2.

By doing this, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the game hall mistakenly turns on the clear switch in an attempt to activate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

In addition, in the modified example 122SG-1 and the modified example 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or when it is started by cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 and the message image 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although an example of confirming whether or not to clear the RAM 102 by displaying is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message image on the image display device 5. Whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state or cold start may be used to confirm whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

In the modified example 122SG-1, the setting value is changed to the image display device 5 by activating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a clear switch and a lock switch 122SG051 turned on by a clerk or the like in the game hall. The example in which the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not displayed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1 has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modification 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the pachinko machine 1 being cold-started and the set value being changed. If the setting value is changed in the image display device 5 or the RAM 102 is cleared, whether or not the RAM 122 is cleared in response to the setting value being changed or the RAM 102 being cleared. A message image 122SG005M3 including options and the like may be displayed, and selection of whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, when the clear of the RAM 122 is selected by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clear processing to clear other information except the setting value information in the RAM 122 (resultant (Both RAM 102 and RAM 122 are cleared) and RAM 122 is not cleared when the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not operated to clear RAM 122 (as a result, only RAM 102 is cleared).

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-mentioned embodiment, the same timing (cold start notification command or setting to the production control board 12 is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is started by cold start and when it is started in the setting changed state. Although the mode in which the RAM clearing process is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted) has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 122SG-4, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 In case of starting with cold start, RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and in case of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, effect control Timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, after transmitting the setting value change end notification command to the production control board 12, that is, the change of the setting value is completed The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state such as when the RAM clearing process is performed later).

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or when it is started in a setting change state. Although an example is shown in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify that (the RAM clear notification is executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and a modification 122SG-5 is a pachinko game. When informing that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by activating the machine 1 in the setting change state (execution of setting value change notification), RAM clear notification is not executed, etc. If a notification with a high priority (for example, notification during setting value change) is executed, the notification with a low priority (for example, RAM clear notification) may not be executed.

When priorities are provided to the respective notifications in this manner, the notifications of lower priority may be executed after the notifications of higher priority are executed. In this case, the notification with low priority is executed in a shorter period than the case where the notification with high priority is not executed to prevent the notification execution period from becoming long. May be.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, no setting is performed on the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. At this time, the confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 normally operates may be executed in parallel with the RAM clear notification, the notification of the change of the set value, the notification of the check of the set value, and the various start notifications described above. .. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, the start notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and the start notification for 40 seconds. The confirmation operation of can be executed.

The checking operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, You may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives them. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 from the time when the setting value change start notification command is received, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed. In this case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the setting value changing notification may be prioritized and the confirmation operation error notification may not be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). A new set value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by hot start. In addition, when the new set value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, , The movable body 32 is slightly moved from the origin position to the effect position, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the origin position again to execute a confirming operation that can be executed in a relatively short period, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is restarted, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 requires a relatively long period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The action may be performed. By doing so, the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated can be shortened.

Further, although the setting value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value is cleared from the RAM 102. The specific information that is not included may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the setting value as the specific information that is not cleared, the provisional setting value as the information that is cleared, the game information, and the like are stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores unclear specific information such as set values, and the other RAM temporarily sets values and games. Information to be cleared such as information may be stored. By doing this, the RAM (temporary setting value, game information, etc.) on the other side is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. RAM) can be cleared or not. Further, the RAM 102 may be provided with an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared.

Also, when two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a SRAM (Static Randam Access Memory) to which a backup battery is connected is connected to a RAM that stores specific information that is not cleared, such as set values. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Randam Access Memory) as the RAM that stores temporary setting values and game information, you can surely clear data that is more important than other data such as setting values. It may be possible to store it without storing it.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is the main board 11 It may be mounted on. By doing so, it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic portion 122SG, the form in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main substrate 11 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main substrate is not limited thereto. The display monitor 122SG029 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to facilitate the operation of changing the set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG in the above-mentioned embodiment, the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set value on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachinko game. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the like in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main board 11. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits the setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, it is the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. Since the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) is executed, both the setting value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-mentioned embodiment, the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is most disadvantageous for the game hall). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set, and the set value 3 may be set as the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the characteristic part 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set in the address F000, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 Indicates that the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. Therefore, some players cause the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clear processing (see FIG. 9-13(A)) after causing the abnormality in the RAM 102, thereby illegally setting the set value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is supposed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on the fact that the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality. It is possible to prevent a person from becoming in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the CPU 120 for effect control, the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sounds and output periods output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although a mode in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control regarding notification at startup is different) has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these special control and specific control In addition to the control related to the notification at the time of startup described above, the initial pattern (see FIG. 9-19), the background image, and the character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko game machine 1 becomes ready for a game. Whether or not to perform control related to the production such as different things (the production mode and the state of the production after the game can be played in the pachinko gaming machine 1), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, It may include a control relating to the confirmation operation such as a mode of the confirmation operation or a different execution period. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be controls in which at least a part of the target controlled by the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. ..

Further, in the characteristic unit 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine, but for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, the game can be performed. Is started, and one game is ended by deriving a variable display result to an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and the variable display derived on the image display device is ended. It can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the embodiment, a message such as "setting change" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 has received the setting value change start notification command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting change is being performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these notifications are performed by the main board 11 (CPU 103). In this case, the main board 11 may send a signal to the management device such as an external hall management computer to specify that the setting is being changed, for example, the information. You may make it notify to an external device by outputting from a terminal board, Furthermore, the main board 11 (CPU103) displays and lights a display, a lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11. By controlling the state, it may be notified from the outside that the setting is being changed. For example, all the indicators and lamps connected to the main board 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the setting change and the other states (playable state), it is preferable that the indicators, lamps, etc. connected to the main board 11 are caused to emit light in a mode different from that during the normal game. ..

Further, not only when the settings are being changed, but also when the settings are being confirmed, the main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify or is connected to the main board 11. The fact that the setting is being confirmed may be notified from the outside so that it can be recognized externally by controlling the display and lighting state of the indicator or lamp that is present.

In this way, by the main board 11 (CPU 103) executing the notification, even for a model without the image display device 5, for example, a model such as a drum machine, the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed. You can recognize that you are inside.

When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp or LED for notifying that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed may be provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, which are connected to the main substrate 11 (CPU 103), the ordinary symbol display, for the purpose of preventing the cost increase by providing these dedicated lamps and LEDs The display mode of the device 20 is a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (variable display, non-variable display (standby), big hit game, etc.), for example, blinking display or special display pattern (special You may make it notify by lighting and displaying in FIG.

Further, in the case of providing a dedicated lamp or LED, in order to prevent the player or the like from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, for example, these lamps or The LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the normal symbol display device 20.

When notifying that both the setting is being changed and the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in the notification mode 1 (same output signal). Alternatively, each of these states may be notified (notified to the outside) in an individual notification mode (different output signal) so that which of the states is specified can be specified from the outside.

Further, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is in the process of changing the settings or checking the settings by turning on/blinking a dedicated lamp or LED, the display control unit in the effect control board 12 Immediately without waiting for the rising of 123 (without waiting for the display of a message such as "setting is being changed" on the image display device 5) to be changed immediately by turning on or blinking a dedicated lamp or LED. It is possible to notify that there is or that the setting is being confirmed.

(Explanation of the characteristic part 148SG in the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 148SG of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic unit 148SG is a gaming machine that can change the effect that can be executed during variable display by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, an interface area 148SG005I is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment. The lower left part of the interface area 148SG005I is a first reserved memory display area capable of displaying a reserved display so that the number of reserved memories of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game of the first special symbol (special figure reserved memory number) can be specified. Is set to the lower right portion of the interface area 148SG005I, it is possible to display the pending display so that the variable storage pending storage number (special figure pending storage number) corresponding to the special drawing game of the second special symbol can be specified. It is set in the second hold storage display area. Furthermore, the upper portion of the interface area 148SG005I is set as a normal timer effect execution area in which a normal timer effect described later can be executed.

The control command transmitted from the relay board 15 to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. These effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp. 9 and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

FIG. 10-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 148SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 10-1B, for example, the result of determination whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probability variation B” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “indeterminate change” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special storage memory number in order to display the special suspension memory number in the first reserved display area or the like in a identifiable manner. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area or the like so as to be identifiable. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination and the random number value MR4 for determination of the universal figure display result is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR4 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

It should be noted that although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR4 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10-2, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR4 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 10-3 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic unit 148SG. In the characteristic portion 148SG, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and the variable display is also performed. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the characteristic portion 148SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the normal reach α, the normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10C, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the feature portion 148SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β. ing. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this feature unit 148SG is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed In this case, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In the characteristic part 148SG, as described above, since the change display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation. That is, in the feature unit 148SG, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the super reach effect of the super reach α or the super reach β is executed at a higher rate than the normal reach effect.

In the characteristic unit 148SG, as will be described later, the variation pattern type is determined first such as the non-reach type, the normal reach type, and the super reach type. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided to It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number of 1, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the characteristic portion 148SG, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited thereto. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the drawing and the second special view.

The display result determination table is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to for determining whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table of the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (highly precise state). The numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "miss", or "small hit".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result to be the "big hit" and the big hit gaming state. , Is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the small and big hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (high-accuracy state), more judgment values are displayed than in the normal state or the time saving state (low-accuracy state). Assigned to. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special map display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, compared with the probability determined (about 1/300 in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment), the probability of determining to control the big hit game state as the "big hit" is high (the present embodiment). Approximately 1/30 in morphological feature 148SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), the probability that the jackpot gaming state is determined to be controlled as compared with the normal state or the time saving state is determined. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

In the display result determination table, the same number of determination values are assigned to "small hits" regardless of the game state. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the gaming state, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" to be controlled to the small hit gaming state is the same (in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, about the same). 1/200).

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 148SG, when it is determined to control the big hit game state with the special map display result as "big hit", based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, one of a plurality of jackpot types. It is a table that is referred to for determining whether In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment depending on whether it is a special drawing game by the symbol display device 4B) is "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B" Is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

Here, the jackpot type in the present feature unit 148SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5(B). In the present feature unit 148SG, high-accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state are available as the jackpot types. Probability variation big hit A and probability variation big hit B which is executed and shifts to the high-precision high-base state, and non-probability variation big-jack that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big-hit gaming state and shifts to the low-precision high-base state. There is.

In the big hit game state by "probability variation big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability variation big hit", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is 16 times (so-called. 16 rounds) is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by "probable variation big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). It's a big hit. Therefore, "probability variation big hit A" may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation jackpot, and "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state of the probability change big hit A or the probability change big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that has occurred again is a probability big hit A or a probability big hit B, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, so that the big hit game state does not go through the normal state. It is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state due to the “non-probable variation big hit” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment), or the predetermined value. Before the special figure game of the number of times is executed, the big hit game state is brought to an end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. The determination values are assigned differently to the jackpot type. That is, when the variation special map is the first special map, the determination value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of “81” to “100”) is assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B” having a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variation special map is the second special map, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied Thus, the proportion of determining the jackpot type as "probable variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided that the big hit type is set to "probable variation big hit B" to be controlled to a short-term open big-jack state with a small number of rounds. In the gaming state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of the short-term open jackpot condition in which a few winning balls are obtained and the amusement of the game is deteriorated. It can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-5(A), the determination value is assigned to the "non-probable variation" jackpot type by the variation special chart being the first special chart or the second special chart. Since they are the same regardless of whether they are present or not, the probability of a non-probable change big hit and the probability of a positive change big hit are the same regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the determination value allocation to the "probability variation big hit B" differs depending on whether the variation special map is the first special chart or the second special chart, and accordingly, "probability variation big hit A". Also, the allocation of the judgment value to "is different depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for the "probable variation big hit A" with a large number of rounds, the variation special chart is the second special chart. It is set so that it is easier to be determined in the case of (1) than in the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variation special map is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from when the variation special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probable variation big hit B". May be. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that when the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B”. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment may be a backup RAM, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least the game state, that is, the data (such as the special figure process flag) corresponding to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 148SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Has been. The game control data holding area 148SG150 shown in FIG. 10-6 is a first special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 148SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 148SG152. The game control timer setting unit 148SG153, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 are provided.

1st special figure reservation storage section 148SG151A, the game sphere passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize sphere device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but it has not started yet The pending data of the figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151A is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning hole, and the first starting condition for the passing (entry) of the game ball is set. Pending data such as a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. Is stored until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 148SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B, the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but it has not yet started. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 148SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. Pending data such as a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. Is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 148SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the holding information that enables the determination of whether or not to be a big hit.

In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passing (entering) of the gaming starting ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. ..

The ordinary figure holding storage unit 148SG151C stores the holding information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure holding storage unit 148SG151C is associated with the holding numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR4 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 148SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 148SG152 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The game control timer setting unit 148SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 148SG153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 148SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 148SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 148SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 148SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, effect control data storage as shown in FIG. Area 148SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 148SG190 shown in FIG. 10-7(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 148SG191, a production control timer setting unit 148SG192, a production control counter setting unit 148SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 148SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 148SG191 stores, for each of the plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state.

The effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 148SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 148SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characteristic unit 148SG of the present embodiment, the data forming the start winning prize reception command buffer 148SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-7(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 148SG194. In the start winning award reception command buffer 148SG194A, in the storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (eg, “4”) of the total reserved storage number of the first special figure reserved storages. (Corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure being displayed in a variable manner are provided. In addition, in the start winning award reception command buffer 148SG194A, a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved memory number of the second special figure reserved memories. , And a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure that is being variably displayed. When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designating command, variable category designation Four commands, that is, a command and a reservation storage number notification command (a first reservation storage number notification command or a second reservation storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 148SG194A are these start mouth winning designation command, symbol designating command, variation category designating command, A storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage is ensured in association with the reserved storage number notification command.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest-order reserved storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. As described above, the storage contents of the buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” that stores the contents of the pending storage where the start condition is satisfied are shifted to the upper position one by one as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be cleared in the decorative pattern variation stop processing which is executed when terminating.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry having the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning award reception command buffer 148SG194A at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening. Then, at the time of the start winning at the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entries corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage of the start winning award receiving command buffer 148SG194A. Go At the time of starting winning, the commands from the starting mouth winning designation command to the number-of-holding-memory notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the start mouth winning award designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the tails "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage, respectively. , The symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning award received command buffer 148SG194A shown in FIG. 10-7(B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display which is finished immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The entry stored in the number “1-0” or “2-0”) is deleted, and the entry (buffer number “1-1” or “2” corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. The entry stored in the entry corresponding to "-1") and the stored contents of the entry after the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variable display of the decorative design of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “3” and “4” are shifted to the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” becomes an area (entry) for storing each command regarding the pending storage which is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 148SG will be described. FIG. 10-8 is a part of the flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the present feature unit 148SG. In this effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prefetching advance notice setting process described above, and then displays the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area and the second hold storage display area at the time of receiving the start winning command buffer 148SG194A. The pending display update process is executed to update the display according to the stored contents of. Then, any one of S170 to S177 is executed.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (148SGS351). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (148SGS351; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning award reception command buffer 148SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are stored together are shifted upward by one buffer number (148SGS352). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so they are erased.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 148SGS351 (148SGS351; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (148SGS353). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (148SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (148SGS353; Y), start. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the winning command buffer 148SG194A at the time of winning each are ranked higher by one buffer number. (148SGS354). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so the contents are erased.

After executing 148SGS352 or 148SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (148SGS355).

Next, the display result of the decorative design (stop design) is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (148SGS356). In this case, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the stop design of the decorative design according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. To do.

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, when the received variation display result designation command is the second variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, 3 as the stop symbol. The combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that the symbols are “7” is determined. Further, when the received variation display result designation command is the third variation display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, as a stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, A combination of decorative patterns such as “333”, “555”, and “999”). Further, when the received variable display result designating command is the fourth variable display result designating command corresponding to the non-probable variation big hit, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, of the decorative design in which three symbols are arranged in even symbols as the stop symbol Determine the combination (big hit pattern).

Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, a combination of decorative patterns having a predetermined rule except the combination of the big hit as the stop symbol (small hit) Design: For example, a combination of “left” and “middle” decorative patterns such as “112” and “223” that are the same, but different only in the “right” decorative pattern, or a sequence such as “123” and “456”. The combination of numbers you selected). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the outlier, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols different from the combination of the big hit and the small hit are non-uniform as the stop symbol Determine (outlier pattern).

In the determination of these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop design of the decorative design may be determined. That is, the stop design may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command read in 148SGS355 is a normal reach or super reach variation pattern (148SGS357). If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command read by the 148SGS355 is a variation pattern of non-reach or special hit (small hit) (148SGS357; N), the procedure proceeds to 148SGS367 and the variation pattern designation command read by the 148SGS355 is When the variation pattern shown is a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach (148SGS357; Y), based on the variation pattern and the variation display result, whether the normal timer effect is executed in the variation display and whether the special timer effect is executed is determined. Is determined (148SGS358).

As shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the normal timer effect is the normal timer for the timing at which the decorative pattern is a combination of reach in the normal timer effect execution area set above the interface area 148SG005I. This is an effect for notifying the reach by operating (starting subtraction display of the value of the normal timer). The normal timer becomes timer-out (timer value is “0”) at the timing when the decorative pattern is a combination of reach. Further, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is made non- display at the start timing of the reach effect of super reach.

Further, the special timer effect is to execute a cut-in effect described later by operating the special timer (starting subtraction display of the value of the special timer) in the timer image 148SG005T displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. It is an effect that informs the timing. The special timer becomes timer-out (the timer value is "0") at the start timing of the cut-in effect. Further, the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is made invisible 3 seconds after the timer of the special timer expires.

The special timer effect in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment displays a specific message based on the operation of the push button 31B during the operation of the special timer, and the jackpot game state is controlled by the displayed message. It is also an effect that executes a button operation effect that suggests a ratio.

In the processing of 148SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the normal timer effect is not executed and the special timer effect is not executed if the change pattern is the normal reach and the change display result is a big hit as shown in FIG. 10-10(A). Is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of the normal timer effect and non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 30%, and non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are performed at a rate of 0%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. If the variation pattern is normal reach and the variation display result is lost, 90% of the normal timer effect non-execution and the special timer effect non-execution are determined, and the normal timer effect execution and the special timer effect non-execution are performed. Is determined at a rate of 10%, non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 0%. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), if the variation pattern is super reach and the variation display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs normal timer effect non-execution and special timer effect non-execution. It is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the normal timer effect and the non-execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the normal timer effect and the execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 40%. If the variation pattern is super-reach and the variation display result is missing, the normal timer effect non-execution and the special timer effect non-execution are determined at a ratio of 40%, and the normal timer effect execution and the special timer effect non-execution are performed. Is determined at a rate of 30%, non-execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of the normal timer effect and execution of the special timer effect are performed at a rate of 10%. decide.

That is, in the characteristic part 148SG in the present embodiment, when attention is paid to the case of performing the variable display in the variation pattern of the normal reach, the ratio of controlling the jackpot gaming state by executing the normal timer effect is (the jackpot expectation degree). , Is set to be higher than the rate at which the normal timer effect is executed to control the big hit game state (big hit expectation in normal reach variation display; normal timer effect execution> normal timer effect non-execution).

Also, focusing on the case of performing variable display in the variation pattern of super-reach, the proportion of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect that is not controlled to the largest jackpot gaming state when neither timer effect is executed (big hit (Expectation level) is low, when only the normal timer effect is executed, when only the special timer effect is executed, when the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are both executed, the proportion of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes higher. It is set (big hit expectation degree in super-reach variation display; execute both normal timer effect and special timer effect> execute special timer effect only> execute normal timer effect only> both normal timer effect and special timer effect Non-execution).

After the execution of 148SGS358, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the normal timer effect has been decided (148SGS359). When it is determined to execute the normal timer effect (148SGS359; Y), the reach notification mode (color of the numerical value displayed as the normal timer) in the normal timer effect is determined based on the variable display result (148SGS360).

In the processing of 148SGS360, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the color of the numerical value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode to 10% as shown in FIG. 10-11(A). A white character is determined by a ratio, a blue character is determined by a ratio of 30%, and a red character is determined by a ratio of 60%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, the color of the numerical value of the normal timer as the reach notification mode is determined to be white characters at a rate of 80%, blue characters at a rate of 15%, and 5%. Determined in red in proportion.

That is, regarding the normal timer effect in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the case where the normal timer is displayed in red characters in the normal timer effect execution area has the highest proportion (big hit expectation) controlled to the big hit game state. When the normal timer is displayed in white characters in the normal timer effect execution area, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is set to be the lowest (the big hit expectation degree for each reach notification mode (character color) in the normal timer effect) : Red letters> blue letters> white letters).

After the execution of 148SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal timer effect start waiting timer, and proceeds to 148SGS362 (148SGS361). When it is determined in the process of 148SGS359 that the normal timer effect is not executed (148SGS359; N), the process of 148SGS360 and 148SGS361 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS362.

In 148SGS362, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the special timer effect has been decided (148SGS362). When it is determined to execute the special timer effect (148SGS362; Y), the effect result of the button operation effect executed during the reach effect of the super reach is determined based on the variable display result (148SGS363), and the special timer effect start waiting is performed. The timer is set (148SGS364).

In the process of 148SGS363, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect result of the button operation effect is "chance" at a rate of 30%. The display is decided, 50% is decided to be "hot!", and 20% is decided to be "super hot!". On the other hand, when the variation display result is a loss, the effect result of the button operation effect is determined to be "chance" display at a rate of 70%, "hot!" display at a rate of 25%, and 5%. Will be displayed as "Gekiatsu!"

In other words, in the button operation effect in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the case where the display is "super hot!" on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B is controlled to the largest jackpot gaming state. The (big hit expectation) is high, and when the "chance!" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the proportion of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is set to be low (button operation effect). Big hit expectation degree for each performance result: “Gekiatsu!” display> “Hot!” display> “Chance!” display).

After the execution of 148SGS364, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect based on the variable display result (148SGS364). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the cut-in effect A in which the character A is displayed is determined at a rate of 20%, and the character B is displayed. The execution of the cut-in effect B is determined at a rate of 80%. When the variation display result indicates a loss, the cut-in effect A is executed at a rate of 80% and the cut-in effect B is executed at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the characteristic unit 148SG of the present embodiment, when the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect, compared with the case where the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect. The ratio (big hit expectation) controlled to the big hit game state is set high (big hit expectation for each character displayed as cut-in effect; display character B>display character A).

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the character A or the character B can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the cut-in effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the cut-in effect, three or more types of characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 may be provided.

When it is determined in 148SGS362 that the non-execution of the special timer effect has been decided (148SGS362; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS365 without executing 148SGS363 and 148SGS364.

In 148SGS365, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether execution of at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined to be executed (148SGSG365). If execution of at least one of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect has been determined (148SGS365; Y), a timer effect execution suggestion to be executed based on the combination of timer effects for which execution has been determined The effect is determined (148SGS366), and the process proceeds to 148SGS367.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-13, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second timer effect is effected. Execution of the execution suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%. When only execution of the special timer effect is determined, execution of the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of the second timer effect execution instructing effect is determined at a rate of 60%. To do. Furthermore, when execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined, the execution of the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the second timer effect executing suggesting effect is performed at 90%. Determined as a percentage.

That is, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, when the second timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed, the special timer effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect executing suggesting effect is executed. Is set.

As described above, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect can be executed by both the normal reach variable display and the super reach variable display, while the special timer effect is performed by the normal reach variable display. Since it can be executed only in the variable display of super reach in which the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is high (the big hit expectation is high), the fact that the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed means that the first timer The variation display is a super-reach variation display at a higher rate than when the production execution suggesting production is executed, that is, the jackpot gaming state is at a higher rate than when the first timer production execution suggesting production is executed. It means being controlled.

The first timer effect execution suggestion effect refers to the operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display, or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the lapse of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. It is an effect to be notified by displaying the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-21(C)). The second timer effect execution suggestion effect is an operation of the push button 31B after the start of the variable display, or the start of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the lapse of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. It is an effect to be notified by displaying the second timer effect execution suggesting image 148SG005B on the display device 5 (see FIG. 10-21(D)).

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the second timer effect execution suggesting image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image larger than the first timer effect executing suggesting image 148SG005A, while the color and shape, Although the messages and the like displayed in the image are the same (see FIGS. 10-21(C) and 10-21(D)), the present invention is not limited to this. The first timer effect execution suggesting image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggesting image 148SG005B may be images in which at least a part of the sizes, colors, shapes, messages displayed in the images, and the like are different.

When it is determined in 148SGS365 that neither the normal timer effect nor the special timer effect is executed (148SGS365; N), the process of 148SGS366 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS367.

In 148SGS367, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence/absence of the cut-in effect, and the effect mode (effect type) of the cut-in effect. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (148SGS368).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation section control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, in 148SGS367, the process table is selected according to the presence/absence of the variation pattern and the cut-in effect, and the effect mode of the cut-in effect, that is, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the cut-in effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the decorative pattern and the cut-in effect are respectively performed by using individual process tables. It may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect device (image display as effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation section (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS369). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner according to a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command in a one-to-one manner. The variable pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variable patterns corresponding to the variable pattern designation command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (148SGS370). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (148SGS371). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left-middle-right decorative pattern to the VRAM every time the predetermined time has elapsed, and the display control unit 123 is written to the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal, whereby the variation of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect display processing during variable display (S172) (148SGS372).

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the variable display effect effect process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by -1 (148SGS401, 148SGS402, 148SGS403), and determines whether the process timer has timed out. (148SGS404). If the process timer has timed out (148SGS404; Y), the process data is switched (148SGS405). That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (148SGS406). Further, the effect device (effect parts) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. set next (148SGS407), and the process proceeds to 148SGS409.

On the other hand, in 148SGS404, when the process timer is out (148SGS404; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer (148SGS408), and the process proceeds to 148SGS409.

In 148SGS409, the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process (148SGS409), and determines whether the normal timer effect start waiting timer or the normal timer effect process timer described later is in operation (148SGS410). ). When the normal timer effect start wait timer or the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS410; Y), after executing the normal timer effect execution process (148SGS411), the process proceeds to 148SGS412. If neither the normal timer effect start wait timer nor the normal timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS410; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS412 without executing the process of 148SGS411.

In 148SGS412, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special timer effect start wait timer or the special timer effect process timer described later is in operation (148SGS412). If the special timer effect start wait timer or the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS412; Y), after performing the special timer effect execution process (148SGS413), the process proceeds to 148SGS414. If neither the special timer effect start waiting timer nor the special timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS412; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS414 without executing the process of 148SGS413.

In 148SGS414, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the non-display timing of the interface area 148SG005I, that is, whether or not it is the timing through the reach effect of the super reach (148SGS414). When it is the non-display timing of the interface area 148SG005I (148SGS414; Y), the interface area 148SGS005I is hidden on the image display device 5 (148SGS415), and the process proceeds to 148SGS416. If it is not the non-display timing of the interface area 148SGS005I (148SGS414; N), the process of 148SGS415 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS416.

In 148SGS416, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation control timer has timed out (148SGS416). When the fluctuation control timer is out of time (148SGS416; Y), the next display screen of the decorative pattern is created and written in the VRAM (148SGS417), the fluctuation control timer is reset, and the process proceeds to 148SGS419 (148SGS418).

If the fluctuation control timer has not timed out (148SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 148SG419 without executing the processes of 148SGS417 and 148SGS418.

In 148SGS419, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (148SGS419). When the variable time timer has not timed out (148SGS419; N), it is further determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (148SGS420). When the confirmation command reception flag is set (148SGS420; Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is hidden, the interface area 148SG005I is redisplayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS421) and the effect control process flag is set. A value corresponding to the decorative pattern variation stop processing is set for (148SGS421), and the variable display effect processing is ended. Further, if the confirmation command reception flag is not set (148SGS420; N), the variable display during presentation process is ended without executing the processes of 148SGS421 and 148SGS422.

In the 148SGS 419, even when the variable time timer has expired (148SGS 419: Y), if the interface area 148SG005I is hidden, the image display device 5 redisplays the interface area 148SG005I and (148SGS421). ), a value according to the decorative symbol variation stop process is set for the effect control process flag (148SGS421), and the variable display effect process is ended.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process in FIG. 10-14. In the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer is in operation (148SGS431). When the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer is operating (148SGS431; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS443, and when the timer effect executing suggesting effect process timer is not in operation (148SGS431; N), the timer effect execution suggesting effect is further executed. Is determined (148SGS432).

When execution of the timer effect execution suggesting effect is not determined (148SGS432; N), the timer effect execution suggesting effect executing process is ended, and when execution of the timer effect execution suggesting effect is determined (148SGS432; Y), It is determined whether it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B by referring to the process data being executed (148SGS433). When it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is started on the image display device 5 (148SGS434). ) Proceed to 148SGS435. If it is not the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS433; N), the process of 148SGS434 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS435.

In 148SGS435, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is in progress (148SGS435). When the push button 31B is not in the operation acceptance period (148SGS435; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended, and when the push button 31B is in the operation acceptance period (148SGS435; Y), the push button 31B is further pressed. It is determined whether an operation has been detected (148SGS436).

When the operation of the push button 31B is not detected (148SGS436; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B based on the process data being executed (148SGS437). ). When it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution processing is ended, and when it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS437; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS438. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected in the 148SGS436 (148SGS436; Y), the process of 148SGS437 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS438.

In 148SGS438, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect is determined (148SGS438). When the execution of the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is decided (148SGS438; Y), the first timer effect execution suggesting effect process table corresponding to the timer effect whose execution is decided is set (148SGS439), 148SGS441. Proceed to. If execution of the second timer effect execution suggesting effect has been decided (148SGS438; N), a second timer effect execution suggesting effect process table corresponding to the timer effect for which execution has been decided is set (148SGS440). Proceed to 148 SGS 441.

As the first timer effect execution suggesting effect process table in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the first timer effect executing suggesting effect process table A set when execution of only the normal timer effect is determined, and the special The first timer effect execution suggesting effect process table B set when execution of only the timer effect is determined, and the first set when both execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are determined The 1-timer production execution suggestion production process table C is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Further, as the second timer effect execution suggesting effect process table in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, a second timer effect executing suggesting effect process table A set when execution of only the normal timer effect is determined. , The second timer effect execution suggesting effect process table B which is set when execution of only the special timer effect is determined, and is set when execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined The second timer effect execution suggesting effect process table C is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, in 148SGS441, the effect control CPU 120 starts the timer effect execution suggestion effect process timer in the process data 1 of the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table set in 148SGS439 or 148SGS440 (148SGS441).

In the timer effect execution suggestion effect process table, display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data for controlling, operation section control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are associated with each process data n (1 to N) in time series. Are arranged in order.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect device (image display as effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) is executed (148SGS442), and timer production execution suggestion production execution processing To finish.

On the other hand, in 148SGS443, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer by -1 (148SGS443), and determines whether the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer has timed out (148SGS444). When the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer has timed out (148SGS444; Y), it is further determined whether or not the timer effecting execution suggesting effect process timer that has timed out is the last timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer ( 148SGS445).

When the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer that has timed out is not the last timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer (148SGS445; N), the process data is switched (148SGS446). That is, the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer is newly started by setting the process effect timer setting value set next in the set timer effect effect suggesting effect process table in the timer effect effect suggesting effect process timer (148SGS447). ). In addition, the production device (production component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next (148SGS448), and the process proceeds to 148SGS450.

If the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer that has timed out is the last timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer (148SGS445; Y), the timer effect execution suggesting effect is ended (148SGS456), and the timer effect execution suggesting effect execution is performed. The process ends.

When the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer is not timed out in 148SGS444 (148SGS444; N), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device according to the content of the process data corresponding to the timer effect execution suggesting effect process timer. Control parts) (148SGS449), and the process proceeds to 148SGS450.

In 148SGS450, the effect control CPU 120 refers to whether or not it is in the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect based on the process data being executed (148SGS450). When it is not in the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect (148SGS450; N), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended, and the notification period of the execution period of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is in progress. In the case (148SGS450; Y), it is determined whether or not only execution of the normal timer effect is determined, that is, the first timer effect execution suggesting effect process table A or the second timer effect executing suggesting effect process table A is set. It is determined whether or not (148SGS451).

When only execution of the normal timer effect is determined (148SGS451; Y), the period of the normal timer effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS452), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended. Further, when the execution of the normal timer effect is not determined or when the execution of the special timer effect is also determined (148SGS451; N), it is determined whether or not only the execution of the special timer effect is determined, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the timer effect execution suggesting effect process table B or the second timer effect executing suggesting effect process table B is set (148SGS453).

When execution of only the special timer effect is determined (148SGS453; Y), the period of the special timer effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS454), and the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended.

Furthermore, when execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined (148SGS453; N), the combined value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period is displayed on the image display device 5. (148SGS455), the timer effect execution suggestion effect execution process is ended.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed as the normal timer effect execution processing in FIG. 10-14. In the normal timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the normal timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS461). When the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS461; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS468, and when the normal timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS461; N), the value of the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer is set to -1. (148SGS462), it is determined whether or not the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer has timed out (148SGS463).

If the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer has not timed out (148SGS463; N), the normal timer effect execution execution process ends, and if the normal timer effect execution start waiting timer has timed out (148SGS463; Y), the normal timer The production process table is set (148SGS464). Then, the normal timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set normal timer effect process table is started (148SGS465).

In the normal timer effect process table, display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, control of sounds output from the speakers 8L, 8R. The sound control execution data for performing the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are associated in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect device (image display as effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS466). For example, the operation of the normal timer is started in the interface area 148SG005I displayed on the image display device 5 (148SGS467), and the normal timer effect execution process is ended.

On the other hand, in 148SGS468, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the normal timer effect process timer by -1 based on that the normal timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS468). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS469). When the normal timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS469; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is a fluctuation pattern of normal reach (148SGS470).

When the variation pattern of the variation display is the normal reach variation pattern (148SGS470; Y), it is determined whether or not the timer-out is the last normal timer effect process timer (148SGS471). When it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has timed out (148SGS471; Y), the normal timer effect is ended and the normal timer effect execution process is ended (148SGS479). The end of the normal timer effect means the end of the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I. Then, if it is not the last normal timer effect process timer that has timed out (148SGS471; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

If the variation pattern of the variation display in 148SGS470 is a super-reach variation pattern (148SGS470; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the last normal timer effect process timer has timed out. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the production of super reach (148SGS472). When it is the last normal timer effect process timer that has timed out (148SGS472; Y), the normal timer effect is ended and the normal timer effect execution process is ended (148SGS479). If it is not the last normal timer effect process timer that has timed out (148SGS472; N), the process proceeds to 148SGS473.

In 148SGS473, the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (148SGS473). That is, the normal timer effect process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the normal timer effect process table to the normal timer effect process timer (148SGS474). In addition, the production device (production component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next (148SGS475), and the process proceeds to 148SGS477.

When it is determined in 148SGS469 that the normal timer effect process timer has not timed out (148SGS469; N), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device (for effect effect) according to the content of the process data corresponding to the normal timer effect process timer. The parts are controlled (148SGS476), and the process proceeds to 148SGS477.

In 148SGS477, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode, that is, whether or not it is the timer out timing of the normal timer in the normal timer effect. (148SGS477). When the display of the normal timer in the interface area 148SG005I is not the timing to change to the reach notification mode (148SGS477; N), the normal timer effect execution process is ended, and the timing of the normal timer display in the interface area 148SG005I changes to the reach notification mode. If there is (148SGS477; Y), the display of the normal timer is changed to the reach notification mode in the character color determined in 148SGS360 (see FIG. 10-9) of the variable display start setting process (148SGS478), and the normal timer effect is produced. The execution process ends.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed as the special timer effect execution processing in FIG. 10-14. In the special timer effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special timer effect process timer is in operation (148SGS481). If the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS481; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS488. If the special timer effect process timer is not operating (148SGS481; N), the value of the special timer effect execution start wait timer is set to -1. (148SGS482), it is determined whether or not the special timer effect execution start waiting timer has timed out (148SGS483).

If the special timer effect execution start wait timer has not timed out (148SGS483; N), the special timer effect execution execution process ends, and if the special timer effect execution start wait timer has timed out (148SGS483; Y), the special timer The production process table is set (148SGS484). Then, the special timer effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set special timer effect process table is started (148SGS485).

In the special timer effect process table, display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, control of sounds output from the speakers 8L, 8R. The sound control execution data for performing the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are associated in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect device (image display as effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS486). For example, the image display device 5 displays the timer image 148SG005T (see FIG. 10-23(B)) for the special timer effect, and the operation of the special timer is started in the timer image 148SG005T (148SGS487) to generate the special timer effect. The execution process ends.

On the other hand, in 148SGS488, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the special timer effect process timer by -1 based on the fact that the special timer effect process timer is operating (148SGS488). Then, it is determined whether or not the special timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS489). When the special timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS489; Y), it is determined whether or not the last special timer effect process timer has timed out (148SGS490). When the timer-out is the last special timer effect process timer (148SGS490; Y), the timer image 148SG005T is hidden from the image display device 5, the special timer effect is ended, and the special timer effect execution process is ended. (148SGS496).

Then, if it is not the last special timer effect process timer that has timed out (148SGS490; N), the process data is switched (148SGS491). That is, the special timer effect process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the special timer effect process table to the special timer effect process timer (148SGS492). In addition, the production device (production component) is controlled based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, and the like set next (148SGS493), and the process proceeds to 148SGS495.

When it is determined in 148SGS489 that the special timer effect process timer has not timed out (148SGS489; N), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device (for effect effect) according to the content of the process data corresponding to the special timer effect process timer. The parts are controlled (148SGS494), and the process proceeds to 148SGS495.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the button operation effect execution process for executing the button operation effect in 148SGS495, and ends the special timer effect execution process.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed as the button operation effect execution processing in FIG. 10-17. In the button operation effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the button operation effect process timer is in operation (148SGS501). When the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS501; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS510, and when the button operation effect process timer is not operating (148SGS501; N), it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B. It is determined whether or not (148SGS502).

If an operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (148SGS502; Y) is to the player in the image display device 5 by initiating the display of the push button of the operation promoting image 148SG005P (see FIG. 10-23 (E)) On the other hand, the operation of the push button 31B is prompted (148SGS503), and the process proceeds to 148SGS504. When the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B is not reached (148SGS502; N), the process of 148SGS503 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS504.

In 148SGS504, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is in progress (148SGS504). When the push button 31B is in the operation acceptance period (148SGS504; Y), it is further determined whether or not the push button 31B is operated (148SGS505). When the push button 31B is not operated (148SGS505; N), it is determined whether it is the operation acceptance end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506). When it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; N), the button operation effect execution processing is ended, and when it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (148SGS506; Y), the process proceeds to 148SGS507.

When the push button 31B is operated in 148SGS505 (148SGS505; Y), the process of 148SGS506 is not executed and the process proceeds to 148SGS507.

Then, in 148SGS507, the effect control CPU 120 starts the button operation effect process timer in the process data 1 of the set button operation effect process table (148SGS508).

In the button operation effect process table, display control execution data for controlling display on the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data for performing the operation, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are associated in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect device (image display as effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation section (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (148SGS509). For example, the display of the effect result of the button operation effect is started on the image display device 5, and the button operation effect execution process is ended.

In 148SGS510, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the button operation effect process timer by -1 based on that the button operation effect process timer is operating (148SGS510). Then, it is determined whether or not the button operation effect process timer has timed out (148SGS511).

When the button operation effect process timer has timed out (148SGS511; Y), it is further determined whether the button operation effect process timer that has timed out is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512). When the button operation effect process timer that has timed out is the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; Y), the button operation effect is ended by ending the display of the effect result of the button operation effect on the image display device 5. Then (148SGS517), the button operation effect execution process is ended.

If the button operation effect process timer that has timed out is not the last button operation effect process timer (148SGS512; N), the process data is switched (148SGS513). That is, the button operation effect process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the set button operation effect process table in the button operation effect process timer (148SGS514). Further, based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. set next, the effect device (effect parts) is controlled (148SGS515), and the button operation effect execution process is ended.

When the button operation effect process timer has not timed out in 148SGS511 (148SGS511; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the button operation effect process timer (148SGS516), and the button source effect execution process is executed. finish.

As described above, by executing the normal timer effect execution process and the special timer effect execution process, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, when only the normal timer effect is executed in the variable display of the change pattern of the normal reach, As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed for 5 seconds from the change start timing. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the timing at which the normal timer times out), the normal timer is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the timing of the fluctuation end. There is.

When only the normal timer effect is executed in the variation display of the variation pattern of the normal reach in this way, the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden in the image display device 5 from the variation start timing to the variation end timing. That is, in the variable display of the normal reach variation pattern, the interface area 148SG005I is always displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, when only the normal timer effect is executed in the change display of the change pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds from the change start timing. .. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I as a normal timer effect for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation (the timing at which the normal timer times out), the normal timer display is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the start timing of the reach effect of super reach. It is like this.

When only the normal timer effect is executed in the variable display of the change pattern of the super reach, the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the change start timing to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach. From the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach to the end timing of the variable display, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden in the image display device 5.

That is, in the case of executing only the normal timer effect among the normal timer effect and the special timer effect in the variable display in the characteristic part 148SG in the present embodiment, the variable display is executed in the change pattern of the super reach as described above. It is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the variation display of the normal reach variation pattern is executed (big hit expectation degree for each variation pattern; super reach> normal reach), and the variation pattern of super reach The interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach when the variable display is executed, while the interface area 148SG005I is not displayed when the variable display of the normal reach is executed. Since it is not displayed, when the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during variable display, the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during variable display. ing.

In the feature part 148SG of the present embodiment, when the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during variable display, the jackpot gaming state is at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during variable display. is exemplified a form to be controlled, the present invention is not limited to this, if the interface region 148SG005I in variable display not hide the hide the interface region 148SG005I during fluctuations display The jackpot gaming state may be controlled at a higher rate than in the case of being played.

Furthermore, in the case of executing only the special timer effect among the normal timer effect and the special timer effect in the variable display in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed for 7 seconds. Next, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the start of the change, and the special timer is operated in the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the special timer being timed out. The timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display is ended) 3 seconds after the special timer is timed out (the start timing of the cut-in effect).

When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the change display of the change pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-20(B), the timer effect is provided for 10 seconds from the change start timing. Execution suggestion production is executed. Next, from the timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the normal timer is operated in the interface area 148SG005I for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation (the timing at which the normal timer times out), the normal timer display is displayed in the reach notification mode for 5 seconds until the start timing of the reach effect of super reach. It is like this.

While the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5 from the variation start timing to the super reach reach production start timing, the image display is performed from the super reach reach presentation start timing to the variation display end timing. The interface area 148SG005I is hidden on the device 5.

In addition, in the fluctuation display, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started on the image display device 5 at a timing 10 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and the special timer is operated in the timer image 148SG005T for 45 seconds or 55 seconds. Then, from the timing 55 seconds or 65 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the cut-in effect is started based on the special timer being timed out. The timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is hidden (display is ended) 3 seconds after the special timer is timed out (the start timing of the cut-in effect).

When performing the special timer effect in the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) and 10-20(B), as shown in FIGS. The button operation effect is also executed for a second. Therefore, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, even during the special timer effect in which the operating period of the timer is longer than the normal timer effect, the player is displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the button operation effect in parallel. It is possible to keep the display focused on, and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, but the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. Is not limited to this, and there may be provided a case where the button operation effect is not executed even during the special timer effect, or a case where the button operation effect is executed during the normal timer effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, when executing only the normal timer effect, after executing the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect for 5 seconds. , 5 seconds after the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect, the normal timer effect is executed, that is, a period of 5 seconds is provided from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the normal timer effect (effect When the start waiting period is 5 seconds) and only the special timer effect is executed, after the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are executed for 7 seconds, the timer effect execution suggesting effect A special timer effect is executed 3 seconds after the end, that is, a period of 3 seconds is provided from the end of the timer effect execution suggestion effect to the start of the special timer effect (the effect start waiting period is 3 seconds), When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, after the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are executed for 10 seconds, the end timing of the timer effect execution suggesting effect Therefore, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed (the effect start waiting period is 0 second).

In this way, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggesting effect differs depending on which timer effect is to be executed. In particular, when the special timer effect is executed, the execution period of the timer effect execution suggesting effect is set longer than when only the normal timer effect is executed. That is, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, when the execution of the special timer effect, which has a longer effect period than the normal timer effect, is determined, the period is longer than the case where only the normal timer effect is determined. The execution period of the timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed over the period.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the case of executing the normal timer effect or the special timer effect during the variable display in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24. ..

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21(A) and 10-21(B), when the variable display is started in the state where the interface area 148SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 is displayed. At operation prompt image 148SG005P is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B while the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B has elapsed, as shown in FIG. , The first timer effect execution suggesting effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first timer effect execution suggesting image 148SG005A, or as the second timer effect execution suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. In 5, the display of the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is executed.

Next, when only the execution of the normal timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-22(A) and 10-22(B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or After the period of the normal timer effect (15 seconds until the reach) is notified in the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started as the normal timer effect in the interface area 148SG005I.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22(C), when the normal timer is timed out at the timing when the decorative pattern is the combination of reach, the normal timer is displayed in any of white, blue, and red colors. Change to the reach notification mode.

Further, after the reach, if the variation pattern of the variation display is the variation pattern of the normal reach, as shown in FIG. 10-22(D), the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination of a loss or a big hit. At this time, the interface area 148SG005I continues to be displayed without being hidden on the image display device 5.

Further, when only the execution of the special timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-23(A) and 10-23(B), the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the first timer effect execution suggestion image are displayed. 2 In the timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, after the period of the special timer effect (45 seconds or 55 seconds which is the period until the decorative design is derived and displayed) is notified, the timer image 148SG005T of the timer image 148SG005T is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5. As the display is started, the operation of the special timer is started in the timer image 148SG005T as the special timer effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23(C) to 10-23(F), while the special timer effect is being executed, the operation of the special timer is continued in the timer image 148SG005T, and the reach effect of super reach is achieved. After the start, the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the right part of the image display device 5 as a part of the button operation effect. As shown in FIG. 10-23(D), the interface area 148SG005I is hidden from the image display device 5 at the start timing of the reach effect of super reach.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B has elapsed, the effect result of the button operation effect on the right part of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-23(G), the opportunity up effect is started at the timing when the special timer times out, and the timer image 148SG005T is hidden 3 seconds after the start of the opportunity up effect. To be done.

Further, when execution of both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is determined in the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-24(A) and 10-24(B), the first timer effect execution is performed. After the combined value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect is notified in the suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the operation of the normal timer is started in the interface area 148SG005I as the normal timer effect. At the same time, the display of the timer image 148SG005T is started in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and the operation of the special timer is started in the timer image 148SG005T as a special timer effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-24(C), when the normal timer is timed out at the timing when the decorative pattern is the combination of reach, the normal timer is displayed in any one of white, blue, and red colors. Change to the reach notification mode. After reaching the reach, as shown in FIG. 10-24(D), the interface area 148SG005I is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

Thereafter, in FIGS. 10-24(D) to 10-24(G), the button operation effect is executed as in FIGS. 10-23(D) to 10-23(G), and the special timer is used as a timer. Opportunity up production starts from the timing when it is out. Further, 3 seconds after the start of the chance-up effect, the timer image 148SG005T is hidden.

As described above, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the image display device 5 can display the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer and the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer, and the interface area during the variable display. When the 148SG005I is hidden, the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during variable display, so whether or not the interface area 148SG005I is hidden Since the player can be paid attention to, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, after the normal timer effect is finished, the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer is hidden at the start timing of the reach effect of super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interface area 148SG005 including the normal timer is displayed at a timing other than the timing at which the reach effect of the super reach is started as long as it is in the variable display after the end of the normal timer effect. It may be hidden.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the rate of executing only the special timer effect to control the big hit game state is set higher than the rate of executing only the normal timer effect to control the big hit game state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the timer effect that is executed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always executed during the special timer effect, while the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect. Even during the execution period of the special timer effect, which has a longer effect period than the effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the game becoming monotonous by executing the button operation effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-13, when the second timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed, the special timer effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first timer effect executing suggesting effect is executed. When the second timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed, the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first timer effect executing suggesting effect is executed. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to which one of the execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game enjoyment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-24, in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect. When both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, it is possible to inform the total value of the period of the normal timer effect and the period of the special timer effect, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic part 148SG of the above embodiment, when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, the normal timer effect period in the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect The example in which the total value of the periods of the special timer effect is notified is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed, In the 1st timer effect execution suggesting effect and the 2nd timer effect execution suggesting effect, only one of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period may be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when executing the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect, the first timer effect executing suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect are Also displays the operation promotion image 148SG005P for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B on the image display device 5 at the previous timing, and based on the operation of the push button 31B, the first timer effect execution suggestion effect or Since the 2 timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first timer effect executing suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect is executed after the push button 31B is operated. , You can improve the fun of playing games.

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, as the predetermined operation in the present invention for the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, an example is shown in which the values of the normal timer and the special timer are subtracted toward 0. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the predetermined operation of the present invention, the values of the normal timer and the special timer may be added toward a specific value.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, a normal timer effect and a special timer effect are exemplified as the predetermined effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined effect in the present invention is For example, the display amount of a predetermined meter or gauge may be increased or decreased.

Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the present embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are illustrated as the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, combinations of effects having different operation modes and effect modes are executed (for example, the first predetermined effect is an effect in which the value of the timer is added, and the second predetermined effect is used). The effect may be to decrease the display amount of the meter).

In the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, the operation promotion image 148SG005P of the same aspect is displayed on the image display device 5 in the case of executing the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the case of executing the second timer effect executing suggesting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is different between the case of executing the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the case of executing the second timer effect executing suggesting effect. The operation promotion image 148SG005P of the aspect may be displayed on the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect is executed according to the mode of the operation promotion image 148SG005P displayed. , You can improve the fun of playing games.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect are always executed in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B, and the normal operation is performed. Although the mode in which the timer effect or the special timer effect is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect are achieved even if the push button 31B is operated. There may be a case where the execution suggestion effect is not executed and the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is not started.

As the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-22(A) and 10-23(A), an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer and a special timer are included. Target timer image 148SG005T including, the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the combined value of the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period, etc., the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A or the second timer effect. Since it is possible to notify by the execution suggestion image 148SG005B, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In particular, as the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect, only one of the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer is targeted for the normal timer effect period. The period of the special timer effect can be notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B. Therefore, the effect of the first timer effect execution suggestion effect and the second timer effect execution suggestion effect The player can be made to pay attention to the target interface area 148SG005I and the timer image 148SG005T, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Although the characteristic part 148SG of the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. However, it is included in the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the special timer effect is executed for the cut-in effect which is an effect during the reach effect of the super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as the modified example 148SG-1, the special timer effect may be executable for the effect executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. In addition, when it is possible to execute the special timer effect for the effect executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, the special timer effect is targeted for the effect executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach. When performing, that is, when executing the special timer effect while the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is displayed (during execution of the normal timer effect), and when performing during the reach effect of super reach (effect such as cut-in effect) When the special timer effect is executed for the target, that is, when the special timer effect is executed when the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer is hidden, the proportion controlled in the jackpot gaming state is different. (For example, when the special timer effect is executed for the effect executed during the reach effect of super reach, it is a big hit compared to the case where the special timer effect is executed for the effect executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach. The rate of being controlled to the gaming state is high). By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the special timer effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed during the variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are performed. You may perform addition production|generation which adds the value of the timer which is operating as production. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25(A) to 10-25(D) as a modified example 155SG-1, the image display device in the period in which the timer is operating as the normal timer effect or the special timer effect. An operation promotion image 148SG005P for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed on 5. Then, after displaying the addition notification image 148SG005C indicating the value to be added to the timer in operation on the image display device 5 based on the operation of the push button 31B, the timer in operation indicating the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C. The value may be added as the value of (special timer in this modification 155SG-1).

In addition, in the modification 155SG-1, the form in which the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition effect is the normal timer or If the special timer is operating, it may be executed based on a trigger other than the operation of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the present modification 155SG-1, the form in which the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C is added as the value of the special timer is illustrated as the addition effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition effect. The value shown in addition notification image 148SG005C may be added as the value of the normal timer, or may be added as the values of both the normal timer and the special timer.

In the modification 155SG-1, the operation promotion image 148SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect, and the addition effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect executed based on the operation of the push button 31B during execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be an effect other than the additive effect. Further, a plurality of operation acceptance periods of the push button 31B during execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be provided, and different effects may be executed based on the acceptance of the operation of the push button 31B in each operation acceptance period. .. Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above embodiment, the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are executed at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the 1st timer effect execution suggesting effect and the 2nd timer effect execution suggesting effect may be executed at different timings.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-26(A) to 10-26(G) as a modified example 155SG-2, for example, the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is produced at the same timing as the characteristic part 148SG. During execution of the normal timer effect after execution (while the normal timer is operating), the operation prompting image 148SG005P that prompts the user to operate the first push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation of the first push button 31B is performed. Based on this, the addition effect is executed.

Then, after adding the value shown in the addition notification image 148SG005C to the value of the short timer by executing the addition effect (display of the addition notification image 148SG005C on the image display device 5), the second push button 31B of the image display device 5 is displayed. A push button operation promotion image 149SG005P that prompts an operation is displayed, and a second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a second timer effect execution suggestion effect based on the operation of the second push button 31B. , Start the special timer effect. In this way, by making it possible to execute the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect at different timings, a game is performed for which timing the timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed. Since the player can be paid attention to, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 155SG-2, the form in which the execution timings of the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are different is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer is not limited. By providing a plurality of timings capable of executing at least one of the timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect, the timer effect executing suggesting effect (and the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are provided at any timing. The player may be allowed to pay attention to whether the timer effect) is executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the embodiment, the period from the start of the first timer effect execution suggesting effect or the second timer effect execution suggesting effect to the execution of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is constant (10 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 155SG-3, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect is performed after the first timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed. By changing the period until the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect from the execution of the second timer effect execution suggestion effect to the normal timer effect or the special timer effect, the game becomes monotonous and the interest is reduced. It may be possible to prevent the accident.

Further, in the characteristic unit 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine, but for example, by using a gaming value, a predetermined number of bets is set for one game. Is started, and one game is ended by deriving the variable display result to a display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and the variable display result derived on the display device is displayed. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated accordingly.

When the gaming machine is used as a slot machine in this way, as a modified example 156SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D), for example, the player instructs the slot machine. According to the operation of the stop switch corresponding to each reel, the number of remaining games of the ART is displayed on the image display device during the ART in which the reel is stopped by the combination of the bell, the replay and the like. Further, during the additional zone in which the number of remaining ART games in the ART is added, the number of remaining games in the additional zone is also displayed on the image display device.

When a specific winning combination (for example, a rare winning combination such as cherry or watermelon) is won while the remaining number of games in ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone are displayed on the image display device in this way, the reel is stopped. Based on this, the additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device as the additional notification effect.

After the additional notification image 148SG005M is displayed on the image display device, the additional game number indicated by the additional notification image 148SG005M may be added to both the number of remaining games in the ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone. ..

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed during the variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 156SG-2. As shown in FIGS. 10-28(A) to 10-28(D), a part of the displayed timer (a part of the normal timer in the modification 156SG-2) is moved by the movable body 32 for a predetermined period. A concealment effect of concealing from the player may be executed over the entire period. When the concealment effect is executed in this manner, the concealment is released at least before the timing at which the normal timer times out, that is, the normal timer is concealed by the movable body 32. The normal timer effect and the concealment effect can be suitably executed by not timer-out.

In this modification 156SG-2, a mode in which a part of the normal timer is hidden by the movable body 32 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the special timer is movable. It may be hidden by the body 32. Further, not only a part of the normal timer or the special timer that is hidden by the movable body 32 but also the whole of the normal timer or the special timer may be hidden by the movable body 32.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the normal timer effect is decoratively executed for the timing when the pattern is the combination of reach, and the special timer effect is executed for the execution timing of the cut-in effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the normal timer effect or the special timer effect may be a timing other than the timing at which these decorative designs are a combination of reach or the execution timing of the cut-in effect. For example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the start timing of the special timer effect, and the special timer effect may be executed for the timing at which the decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the special timer effect having a high jackpot expectation degree is executed by the execution of the normal timer effect having a low jackpot expectation degree. Can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are executed during variable display for executing the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the first timer effect execution suggesting effect are variable displays before the variable display for executing the normal timer effect and the special timer effect. To a plurality of variable displays. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect over a plurality of variable displays, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, when the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect are executed, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are surely executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the first timer effect execution suggesting effect or the second timer effect execution suggesting effect is executed, the normal timer effect or the special timer effect is not executed. Good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the normal timer and the special timer are hidden from the image display device 5 at different timings is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The normal timer and the special timer may be hidden from the image display device 5 at the same timing. By doing so, for example, the player can be made to pay attention to an important effect that indicates whether or not the variable display result of the reach effect of super reach or the like is a big hit, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above embodiment, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are started from the timing when the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are finished, but The present invention is not limited to this, and in the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect executing suggesting effect are finished for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds to It may start after 10 seconds). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect while the first timer effect execution suggesting effect and the second timer effect execution suggesting effect are being executed. Can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed during the variable display has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be performed. The special timer effect may be executed as an effect other than during variable display such as during a big hit game. For example, when it is possible to execute the normal timer effect and the special timer effect during the big hit game, the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, an effect that informs that the game state is controlled to the state of probability change after the big hit game, You may perform the effect which notifies that the big hit game is a 16 round big hit.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, a mode in which the value of each timer is subtracted toward 0 is illustrated as a normal timer effect or a special timer effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, an effect (freezing effect) in which the value of each timer is stopped for a certain period of time may be executed. In addition, when the freeze effect can be executed in this way, by providing a case where a part of the value of each timer is hidden by the movable body 32 as shown in Modification 156SG-2, the timer can be operated at any timing. The player may be allowed to pay more attention to whether or not the effect targeted for the effect is executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the normal timer effect and the special timer effect are executed in the image display device 5 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. 1 may be provided with a display means different from the image display device 5 so that the normal timer effect and the special timer effect can be executed by the display means. By doing so, it is possible to give a special feeling to the execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect, and it is possible to secure an area for displaying another effect on the image display device 5, so that the pachinko machine can be used. The effect of production in the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which at least a part of the execution periods of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal timer effect is not limited to this. The timer effect and the special timer effect may be executed such that there are no overlapping periods. In such a case, for example, the normal timer effect may be executed for the special timer effect, that is, the special timer may be activated when the normal timer times out.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the proportion controlled to the jackpot gaming state is different depending on the execution/non-execution of the normal timer effect and the special timer effect is exemplified, but as described above, the special timer effect is performed. By executing the normal timer effect for the target, the normal timer effect may be simply an effect that suggests the execution of another effect, and may be irrelevant to the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the characteristic part 148SG of the above-described embodiment, the interface area 148SG005I including the normal timer and the timer image 148SG005T including the special timer can be displayed on the image display device 5, and whether the interface area 148SG005I is hidden or not. The example in which the proportion controlled to the big hit game state is different according to is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a timer image including a special timer with a different target effect is displayed as an image. A plurality of devices can be displayed on the device 5 (for example, three timer images are displayed on the image display device 5, and the first timer image (first special timer) is used for the first simulated rendition and the second timer image. In the (second special timer), the second pseudo-reproduction is performed, and in the third timer image (the third special timer), each special timer is operated even if the reach effect of super reach is targeted. Good. Furthermore, when a plurality of timer images 148SG005T can be displayed in this way, the proportion controlled to the big hit game state may be different depending on the number of displayed timer images 148SG005T.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach is displayed from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (characteristic portion 31AK of FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), the main board 11 ( Any of a plurality of setting values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the CPU 103), and the set secret value obtained by converting the set setting value is stored in the RAM 102, and the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). On the side, a mode (a characteristic part 122SG of FIGS. 9-1 to 9-27) in which a suggestion effect (morning background effect) that suggests the set value that is set can be executed, a normal timer effect or a special effect during variable display. Although the form (feature portion 148SG of FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-28) capable of executing the timer effect is disclosed, a plurality of feature portions of these feature portions may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the characteristic part 122SG and the characteristic part 148SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a normal timer effect, a special timer effect, and effects (button operation effect, cut-in effect) related to these normal timer effect and special timer effect. , Timer effect execution suggestion effect, etc.) and the determination rate of each effect mode may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-23222. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-23222, it is not possible for the player to pay attention to the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display after being in the specific mode, which improves the enjoyment of the game. There is a problem that you can not. Therefore, when attention is paid to the problem, as means 1 of invention 148SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
An image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5),
A suggestive effect (for example, reach effect or cut-in effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled can be executed, and a predetermined display (for example, a normal timer or a special timer) displayed on the image display means is used. The predetermined operation (for example, the operation of subtracting the value of the normal timer or the special timer) is performed to specify the display mode of the predetermined display (for example, the normal timer or the special timer is timed out (the value of the normal timer or the special timer is 0 10)) a predetermined effect (for example, a normal timer effect or a special timer effect) that can be executed in response to the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the variable effect shown in FIG. 10-14). The part that executes the intermediate production process),
Equipped with
The predetermined display includes a first predetermined display (for example, a timer image 148SG005T including a special timer) and a second predetermined display different from the first predetermined display (for example, an interface area 148SG005I including a normal timer),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the second predetermined display is hidden and when the second predetermined display is not hidden (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during variable display). If it is done, the interface area 148SG005I is controlled to the big hit game state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during variable display)
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is hidden, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 148SG,
When the second predetermined display is hidden, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the second predetermined display is not hidden (for example, the interface area 148SG005I is hidden during variable display). If it is done, the interface area 148SG005I is controlled to the big hit game state at a higher rate than when the interface area 148SG005I is not hidden during variable display)
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the second predetermined display is hidden, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using the first predetermined display when the second predetermined display is not displayed is controlled to be in an advantageous state as compared with the predetermined effect using the first predetermined display and the second predetermined display. When the special timer effect is executed for the effect executed during the reach effect of the super reach, as shown in the modified example 148SG-1, it is executed before the start of the reach effect of the super reach. (The proportion that is controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the special timer effect is executed for the effect to be performed)
According to this feature, the player can draw attention to the effect mode of the predetermined effect using the first predetermined display.

Furthermore, as means 4 of the invention 148SG,
The predetermined effect using only the first predetermined display has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the predetermined effect using only the second predetermined display (for example, executing only a special timer effect and hitting a big hit). (The rate at which the game state is controlled is set higher than the rate at which the normal timer effect is executed and the jackpot is controlled)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the predetermined effect.

Furthermore, as means 5 of the invention 148SG,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting motion,
The effect execution means can execute an action corresponding effect (for example, a button operation effect) based on the detection result of the operation detecting means,
In the first predetermined display, a first period (for example, 15 seconds from the start of the normal timer production until the decorative pattern becomes a combination of reach as shown in FIG. 10-20B) has elapsed as the predetermined production. It is a display that becomes the specific mode when
The second predetermined display is a second period that is longer than the first period as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20(B), the cut-in effect starts from the start of the special timer effect). 45 seconds or 55 seconds until it is done is a display that becomes the specific mode when,
During the second period, the rate at which the action corresponding effect is executed is higher than that in the first period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, the button operation effect is always performed during the special timer effect). (While is executed, the button operation effect is not executed during the normal timer effect)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game during a predetermined effect.

In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2015-85082. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-85082, there is a problem in that the entertainment for the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area cannot be improved because the production targeting the second numerical value display area is not executed. .. Therefore, when attention is paid to the problem, as means 1 of the invention 156SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
At least a first numeric display area (for example, Lee pointer over a face region 18SG005I including normal timers, modification remaining game count display area of the ART in 156SG-1) and the second numerical value display area (e.g., a timer image 148SG005T including special timer And a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) having a remaining game number display area of the additional zone in the modification 156SG-1;
A predetermined effect that updates the numerical value in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area to a specific value (for example, a normal timer effect, a special timer effect, or an addition game in the modified example 156SG-1). The number is added to the number of remaining games in ART and the number of remaining games in the additional zone), and a special effect for suggesting the predetermined effect (for example, shown in FIG. 10-22(A) or FIG. 10-23(A)). As described above, the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period are notified by the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B) and the effect execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The effect execution means can execute, as the special effect, a suggestive effect for the content displayed in at least one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area (for example, FIG. 10). -22(A), FIG. 10-23(A), and FIG. 10-24(A), the normal timer effect period, the special timer effect period, the normal timer effect period and the special timer effect period As shown in the modified example 156-1 or the part of notifying the combined value in the first timer effect execution suggesting image 148SG005A and the second timer effect executing suggestion image 148SG005B, the number of additional games is set to the number of remaining games in the ART and the additional zone. (The part to be added to both of the remaining games)
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute an effect with the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area as a suggestion target, it is possible to execute the game. Can be improved.

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 156SG,
As the special effect, the effect execution means can execute an effect in which only one of the first numerical value display area and the second numerical value display area is a suggestion target (for example, shown in FIG. 10-22. As shown in FIG. 10-23, the first timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B notify the normal timer effect period, and the special timer effect period as shown in FIG. (A portion notified by the timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005A and the second timer effect execution suggestion image 148SG005B)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to the numerical value display area which is the target of the special effect.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 156SG,
The effect execution means has already executed, as the special effect, an effect that suggests execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a second timer effect execution suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-26(F) of Modification 155SG-2). A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect that suggests a special change in a numerical value in a predetermined effect (for example, an additive effect shown in FIG. 10-26(C) of Modification 155SG-2). According to this feature, the player can be paid attention to the special effect.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Gaming board 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player ,
And suggest directing suggests be controlled before Symbol Advantageously state, before execution of the suggested effect, to display a predetermined display indicating the time to the suggestion effect is performed, the passage of the the predetermined display time By sequentially updating accordingly, a predetermined effect that suggests the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed, and an effect execution means capable of performing at least a specific effect that makes the predetermined display difficult to view or invisible .
Equipped with
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect having a different effect mode from the first predetermined effect,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a special effect including a first special effect and a second special effect having an effect mode different from that of the first special effect before executing the predetermined effect.
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate than when the first predetermined effect is executed,
When the second special effect is executed, the second predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first special effect is executed,
The period from the execution of the first special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect is different from the period from the execution of the second special effect to the execution of the predetermined effect,
The special effect is an effect that suggests execution of the predetermined effect,
The presentation execution section, Ri executable der at different timings the special effect,
When the specific effect is executed during execution of the predetermined effect, the suggestion effect is executed.
End the specific effect that is being executed before imming,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images